(describe_buffer_bindings): Add `\f\n' in front of titles.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
40e857ea
DL
19** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
20suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
21
c08398de
DL
22** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
23buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
24contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
25by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
26insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
27the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
28Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
29
0b8a3a6d
DL
30** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
31environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
32
33** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
34point in a pop-up window.
35
36** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
37displays all characters in that character set.
38
39** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
40coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
41
5cb6a58e
SM
42** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
43on the context.
44
a1b8d58b
GM
45** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
46
6e417ca5
DL
47** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
48been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
49
5898e075
DL
50** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
51`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
52indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
53indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
54
abfcc168
GM
55** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
56sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 57(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
58You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
59
cc181e95
GM
60** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
61on the display using several methods
62
63- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
64a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
65be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
66
67- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
68equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
69
da4496b6 70- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
71
72- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
73the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
74
0daee095 75** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
76an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
77command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
78does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 79
176256a1 80** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
81`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
82typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 83
dd0add8e
DL
84** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
85characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
86
699238d9
GM
87** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
88compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
89this behavior.
90
91The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
92compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
93Emacs dump core.
94
95** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 96
7233c5bd
GM
97*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
98whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
99is useful for debugging X problems.
100
101Example:
102
699238d9 103 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 104
100b3cbb
GM
105*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
106visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
107the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
108and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
109visual class names are
110
111 TrueColor
112 PseudoColor
113 DirectColor
114 StaticColor
115 GrayScale
116 StaticGray
117
118Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
119`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
120meaning.
121
122The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
123supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
124`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
125visual.
126
127Example:
128
699238d9 129 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
130
131*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
132specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
133default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
134resource values are `true' or `on'.
135
136Example:
137
699238d9 138 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 139
0d0c76b8
EZ
140** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
141more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
142now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
143
42088c12 144** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 145display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
146shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
147be customized.
c60ea02e 148
31047e0d
DL
149** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
150
b02786f9
GM
151** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
152all frames except the selected one.
153
3261c1d8
DL
154** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
155to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
156
ffe36136
GM
157** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
158the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
159area or with tooltips.
160
559cee90
DL
161** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
162read mail from the menu etc.
163
271b4185
GM
164** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
165a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
166
0daee095
GM
167** Changes in Texinfo mode.
168
169** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
170macros
171
172 Key binding Macro
173 -------------------------
174 C-c C-c C-s @strong
175 C-c C-c C-e @emph
176 C-c C-c u @url
177 C-c C-c q @quotation
178 C-c C-c m @email
179
559cee90
DL
180** Changes in Outline mode.
181
182There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
183`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
184the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
185
404fa7d6
DL
186** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
187groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
188
8964fec7
SM
189** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
190or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
191several other special buffers.
192
39783d73
WP
193** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
194under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
195.emacs file.
196
197The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
198determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
199
d35fce81
GM
200** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
201abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
202`directory-abbrev-alist'.
203
df5a1902
GM
204** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
205is running in batch mode. For example,
206
207 (message "%s" (read t))
208
209will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
210to standard output.
211
a933dad1
DL
212** Faces and frame parameters.
213
214There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
215Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
216`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
217`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
218sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
219for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
220parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
221
222Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
223`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 224`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
225`default' face and vice versa.
226
f77a4a8a
GM
227** New face `menu'.
228
229The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
230Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
231attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
232
a933dad1
DL
233** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
234
235The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
236colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
237correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
238the screen gamma of a frame's display.
239
240PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
241in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
242color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
243
244The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
245`ScreenGamma'.
246
247** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
248
249The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
250Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
251oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
252of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
253the text.
254
255** Emacs has a new face implementation.
256
257The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
258font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
259height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
260These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
261specify a font.
262
263Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
264These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
265under Lisp changes, below.
266
267** New default font is Courier 12pt.
268
269** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
270its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
271it is hollow.
272
273** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
274truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
275foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
276customizing face `fringe'.
277
278** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
279can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
280
281** LessTif support.
282
283Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
284need a version 0.88.1 or later.
285
286** Toolkit scroll bars.
287
288Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
289LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
290configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
291bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
292bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
293Emacs.
294
295When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
296Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
297Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
298Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
299define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
300`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
301
302Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
303a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
304directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
305different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
306system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
307add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
308
309The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
310`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
311This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
312image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
313Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
314
315** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
316
317When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
318widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
319Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
320
321** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
322
323When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
324whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
325defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
326highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
327displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
328whitespace.
329
330** Busy-cursor.
331
332Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
333display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
334
335** Blinking cursor
336
337M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
338terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
339and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
340the group `cursor'.
341
342** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
343
344This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
345generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
346See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
347details.
348
349Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
350have to do anything to activate it.
351
352** Tabs and variable-width text.
353
354Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
355defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
356independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
357Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
358
359** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
360
361*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
362
363 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
364
79dd1637
RS
365The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
366LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 367
79dd1637
RS
368*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
369LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
370
371** Hscrolling in C code.
372
cc181e95
GM
373Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
374`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
375customized.
a933dad1
DL
376
377** Tool bar support.
378
379Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
380how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
381
382** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
383
384Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
385mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
386line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
387about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
388in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
389
390Currently, the following actions have been defined:
391
392- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
393buffers.
394
395- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
396M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
397
398- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
399
559cee90 400- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
401toggles the read-only status.
402
403- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
404
405** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
406
407When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 408from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
409non-nil.
410
411** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
412
413Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
414Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
415the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
416italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
417Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
40e857ea 418attributes like overlines, strike-through, box are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
419
420** Sound support
421
422Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
423(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
424Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
425(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
426to enable sound support.
427
428** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
429the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
430forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
431value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
432users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
433even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
434
435The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
436
437** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
438
439As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
440drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
441`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
442
443** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
444bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
445
446This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
447`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
448variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
449
450** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
451
452When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
453value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
454number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
455fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
456
457When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
458value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
459number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
460fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
461
462** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
463notably at the end of lines.
464
465All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
466spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
467
eee54b0e
DL
468There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
469
a933dad1
DL
470** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
471query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
472after each match to get the replacement text.
473
f0124b4a 474** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
475edit the replacement string.
476
477** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
478you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
479lisp-complete-symbol.
480
a933dad1
DL
481** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
482
483If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
484longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
485on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
486by setting the following variable:
487
488- User option: max-mini-window-height
489
490Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
491fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
492specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
493
494Default is 0.25.
495
0d43b60d
GM
496** Changes to hideshow.el
497
498Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
499selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
500
501*** Generalized block selection and traversal
502
503A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
504(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
505which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
506`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
507point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
508(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
509
510If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
511i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
512backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
513the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
514
515*** Isearch support for updating mode line
516
517During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
518blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
519line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
520portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
521is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
522
523To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
524something like this in your .emacs.
525
526 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
527 (lambda ()
528 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
529
559cee90
DL
530** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
531
532If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
533entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
534log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
535
536New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
537buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
538
539Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
540if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
541
542The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
543expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
544cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
545a file.
546
3476b54a
GM
547** Changes in Font Lock
548
549*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
550font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
551mode.
552
b3b98592
GM
553** Comint (subshell) changes
554
555Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
556and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
557
558The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
559buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
560buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
561
562The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
563M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
564the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
565
e26cec67
GM
566** Changes to Rmail mode
567
c0510d27
GM
568*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
569set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
570receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
571recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
572`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
573as correspondent.
574
575Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
576mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 577regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 578
3b55acc9
GM
579*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
580to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
581Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
582with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
583for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
584
6a1950ec
GM
585*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
586like `j'.
587
5bb6f079
RS
588*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
589specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 590digest message.
e26cec67 591
993d8b7d
DL
592*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
593in which folder to put messages automatically.
594
400a1ed0
GM
595** Changes to TeX mode
596
597The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
598`latex-mode'.
599
a933dad1
DL
600** Changes to RefTeX mode
601
602*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
603 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
604 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
605 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
606 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
607 can be edited from that buffer.
608
609*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
610 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
611 `A' to use all marked entries).
612
613*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
614 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
615
616*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
617 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
618 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
619 been cited.
620
38de9631
GM
621** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
622The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
623semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
624in column 1 are always made leaves.
625
a933dad1
DL
626** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
627has the following new features:
628
629*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
630may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
631to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
632time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
633
634*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
635feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
636file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
637compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
638pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
639defaults to 1.
640
b675095c
GM
641** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
642file names.
643
a933dad1
DL
644** Tooltips.
645
646Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
647mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
648can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
649
650Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
651variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
652the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
653tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
654
655** Customize changes
656
657*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
658`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
659cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
660
661*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
662Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
663default).
664
0ae51efb
GM
665*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
666between custom options. Example:
667
668 (defcustom default-input-method nil
669 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
670 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
671 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
672 :group 'mule
673 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
674 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
675
676This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
677current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
678first in a custom-set-variables statement.
679
a933dad1
DL
680** New features in evaluation commands
681
682The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
683modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
684print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
685customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
686eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
687
a933dad1
DL
688** Dired changes
689
690*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
691command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
692is, delete only empty directories.
693
694*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
695command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
696copy directories recursively.
697
f6737cde
GM
698*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
699in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
700the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
701
a933dad1
DL
702** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
703use the -f option when sending mail.
704
b1c609b1
GM
705** CC mode changes.
706
707Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
708current user setups (although it's believed that these
709incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
710However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
711back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
712compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
713release.
714
715*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
716When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
717variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
718take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
719is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
720settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
721possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
722Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
723
724By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
725special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
726the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
727of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
728above.
729
730Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
731when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
732function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
733call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
734then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
735values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
736only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
737function documentation for more info.
738
739The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
740especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
741with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
742intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
743such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
744is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
745configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
746global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
747
748(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
749
750**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
751This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
752
753This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
754variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
755completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
756the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
757empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
758style system.
759
760**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
761In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
762c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
763as far as possible.
764
765*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
766CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
767surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
768chapter about this in the manual.
769
770**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
771The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
772recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
773primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
774adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
775
776**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
777This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
778c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
779
780**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
781This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
782
783It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
784Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
785A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
786inside CC Mode.
787
788Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
789causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
790the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
791available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
792cc-mode/).
793
794**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
795The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
796specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
797literals.
798
799**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
800It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
801prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
802you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
803this function.
804
805*** Fixes to IDL mode.
806It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
807to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
808struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
809Thanks to Eric Eide.
810
811*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
812It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
813opening braces hangs and when they don't.
814
815**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
816
817*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
818See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
819better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
820and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
821
822*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
823previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
824the column specified by comment-column.
825
826*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
827In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
828is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
829prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
830contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
831don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
832
833*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
834instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
835arguments.
836
837*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
838
839*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
840c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
841c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
842variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
843Provan).
844
845*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
846
c407c570
GM
847** Makefile mode changes
848
849*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
850
851*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
852Fontlock mode is active.
853
87be76f6
GM
854** Isearch changes
855
c407c570
GM
856** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
857respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
858that started the search.
859
87be76f6 860*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
861selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
862
87be76f6
GM
863*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
864
d35fce81 865Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
866`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
867search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
868before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
869highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
870`secondary-selection'.
871
872The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
873will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
874Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
875using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
876usual snappy response.
877
878If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
879matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
880set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
881isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
882
35384f06
GM
883** Changes in sort.el
884
885The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 886as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
887new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
888numeric base.
87be76f6 889
d7b511c4
GM
890** Changes to Ange-ftp
891
892*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
893names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
894sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
895
d7b511c4
GM
896*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
897ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
898
4b9347b3
GM
899** Shell script mode changes.
900
901Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
902derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
903sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
904
79214ddf
FP
905** Etags changes.
906
907*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
908
aca0be23 909*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
910possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
911{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
912This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
913a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 914
79214ddf
FP
915*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
916declarations when given the --declarations option.
917
918*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 919"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
920
921*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
922types.
923
de370c4c 924*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
925
926*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
927
928*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
929are now tagged.
930
931*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
932variables are tagged.
933
934*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
935
8dc78b52
FP
936*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
937for PSWrap.
79214ddf 938
f6737cde
GM
939** Changes in etags.el
940
3f6e4b8b
GM
941*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
942tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
943is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
944
f6737cde
GM
945*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
946the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
947
948If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
949FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
950TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
951obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
952
953TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
954
955FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
956List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
957
958A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
959
960 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
961 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
962 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
963
964*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
965of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
966
967*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
968names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
969
fbc164de
PE
970** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
971and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
972LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
973
0b8a3a6d
DL
974** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
975Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
9768859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
977There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 978
e33b0397
DL
979** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
980remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
981appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
982
983** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
984
6f8ea2ae
DL
985** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
986
c0510d27
GM
987** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
988containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
989expression from that list, are not checked.
990
a933dad1
DL
991** New modes and packages
992
5cb6a58e
SM
993*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
994package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
995be more robust while offering the same functionality.
996
578979ee
GM
997*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
998facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
999separate Texinfo file.
1000
dc1178bf
SM
1001*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1002or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1003provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1004It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1005used to enter checkin log messages.
1006
6abca616
EZ
1007*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1008without invoking external programs.
1009
1010The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1011and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1012`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1013is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1014Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1015
1016The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1017page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1018
5e5dff44
GM
1019*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1020authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1021
1022The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1023the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1024the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1025Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1026even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1027single step.
1028
1029On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1030matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1031probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1032contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1033
f7136ee8
GM
1034*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1035unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1036actually modifying content of a buffer.
1037
bbd9b566
GM
1038*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1039PostScript.
1040
1041Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1042
1043The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1044
1045 ; comment (until end of line)
1046 A non-terminal
1047 "C" terminal
1048 ?C? special
1049 $A default non-terminal
1050 $"C" default terminal
1051 $?C? default special
1052 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1053 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1054 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1055 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1056 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1057 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1058 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1059 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1060 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1061 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1062 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1063 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1064 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1065 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1066 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1067
1068Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1069
99453a38
GM
1070*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1071align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1072determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1073example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1074equal signs of assignments.
1075
559cee90
DL
1076*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1077paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1078
6448a6b3
GM
1079*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1080list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1081buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1082customize the package.
1083
249652b1
GM
1084*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1085replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1086is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1087and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1088not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1089which answers different needs.
1090
3476b54a
GM
1091*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1092suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1093expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1094course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1095reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1096to be enabled.
1097
8964fec7
SM
1098*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1099containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1100
a933dad1
DL
1101*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1102
1103*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1104
1105*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1106
1107*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1108Pascal) language.
1109
1110*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1111the text at point.
1112
1113*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1114
8d54eb69
DL
1115*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1116
a933dad1
DL
1117*** whitespace.el ???
1118
ebcfda83
GM
1119*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1120files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1121(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1122interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1123often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1124uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1125codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1126
1127*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1128
1129Here is an example of columns:
1130
1131horse apple bus
1132dog pineapple car EXTRA
1133porcupine strawberry airplane
1134
1135Doing the following settings:
1136
1137 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1138 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1139 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1140 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1141
1142
1143Selecting the lines above and typing:
1144
1145 M-x delimit-columns-region
1146
1147It results:
1148
1149[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1150[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1151[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1152
1153delim-col has the following options:
1154
1155 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1156 before all columns.
1157
1158 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1159 between each column.
1160
1161 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1162 after all columns.
1163
1164 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1165 each column.
1166
1167delim-col has the following commands:
1168
1169 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1170 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1171
f507826c
GM
1172*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1173were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1174is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1175
1176The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1177
1178To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1179
1180To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1181M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1182
1183To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1184M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1185
8062f458
DL
1186*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1187text.
1188
36e24b82 1189*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1190of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1191specific to Message mode.
1192
36e24b82
DL
1193*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1194viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1195with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1196
aaa659ef
DL
1197*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1198interface to access directory servers using different directory
1199protocols. It has a separate manual.
1200
eee54b0e
DL
1201*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1202for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1203
612839b6
GM
1204*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1205
1206*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1207minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1208
399da7e3
DL
1209*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1210with the diary features.
1211
6e417ca5
DL
1212*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1213numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1214
a933dad1
DL
1215** Withdrawn packages
1216
1217*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1218functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1219
3261c1d8
DL
1220*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1221
1222*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1223
1224\f
1225* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1226(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1227
dce6b995
GM
1228** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
1229and event names in ange brackets.
1230
25fa6deb
GM
1231** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1232call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
1233message; it will be truncated instead.
1234
1681ead6
GM
1235** The variable line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1236meaning no limit.
1237
c08398de
DL
1238** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1239coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1240DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1241
80c05bd3 1242** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1243of a primitive.
1244
80c05bd3
DL
1245** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1246buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1247This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1248than replacing the local map.
1249
4bc7a543
DL
1250** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1251after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1252
1253** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1254
a933dad1
DL
1255\f
1256* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1257
1258Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1259--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1260When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1261so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1262
0b8a3a6d
DL
1263*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1264`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1265when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1266multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1267
1268*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1269`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1270contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1271
1272*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1273changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1274[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1275regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1276the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1277extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1278bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1279eight-bit-graphic.
1280
1281** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1282
1283A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1284a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1285character set as previously.
1286
1287*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1288They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1289modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1290
1291CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1292characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1293range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1294case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1295
1296FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1297name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1298
1299*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1300registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1301"fontset-default".
1302
1303*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1304argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1305
1306** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1307composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1308buffers and strings.
1309
1310*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1311character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1312code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1313have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1314composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1315composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1316The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1317also been deleted.
1318
1319*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1320specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1321`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1322
1323*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1324MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1325composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1326may differ between buffer and string text.
1327
1328*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1329COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1330
1331*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1332directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1333Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1334`composition' from STRING.
1335
1336*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1337a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1338
1339*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1340obsolete.
1341
1342** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1343Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1344character set is not used.
1345
1346** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1347`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1348X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1349
1350+++
1351** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1352are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
13530xA0..0xFF repectively.
1354
399da7e3 1355+++
f0124b4a
DL
1356** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1357that offset in the file before writing.
1358
3bbc50af
DL
1359** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1360promised long ago.
1361
7464346d
GM
1362** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1363modes.
1364
c94f4677 1365- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1366
c94f4677
GM
1367Register a new minor mode.
1368
1369TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1370is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1371
1372NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1373is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1374symbol whose value is such a string.
1375
1376Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1377to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1378
1379Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1380in `minor-mode-alist'.
1381
1382Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1383It is currently not used.
7464346d 1384
612839b6
GM
1385** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1386`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1387from which the command was issued.
1388
1389** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1390`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1391`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1392additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1393operate on.
1394
271b4185
GM
1395** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1396to `window-buffer-height'.
1397
1398- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1399
1400Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1401The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1402lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1403
1404Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1405respectively.
1406
1407If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1408COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1409
1410The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1411obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1412on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1413
1414Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1415buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1416possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1417is currently displayed in some window.
1418
3c30cb6e
DL
1419** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1420argument function's results.
1421
62f20204
GM
1422** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1423signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1424
c0510d27
GM
1425** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1426header is the list of headers passed to it.
1427
1428** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1429ignores differences in case and text representation.
1430
1431** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1432cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1433as follows:
1434
1435 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1436 nil don't display a cursor
1437 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1438 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1439 others display a box cursor.
1440
9a0dd3dc
GM
1441** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1442an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1443defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1444set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1445
d7b511c4 1446** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1447specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1448the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1449text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1450
1451Example:
1452
1453 (string-to-syntax "()")
1454 => (4 . 41)
1455
1fa28578
GM
1456** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1457other than 10.
1458
1459*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1460INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1461
1462 #b1111
1463 => 15
1464 #b-1111
1465 => -15
1466
1467*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1468
1469 #o666
1470 => 438
1471
1472*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1473
1474 #xbeef
1475 => 48815
1476
1477*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1478
1479 #2R-111
1480 => -7
1481 #25rah
1482 => 267
1483
3d4ff2dd 1484** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1485the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1486and isn't a string.
1487
3d4ff2dd
GM
1488** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1489a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1490value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1491not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1492
16ce590d
DL
1493+++
1494** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1495
73825616 1496** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1497for a regexp in a string.
1498
1499** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1500`mouse-position-function'.
1501
723e779c
GM
1502** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1503that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1504
d1e103b2
GM
1505** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1506Keywords are now always considered constants.
1507
31047e0d
DL
1508+++
1509** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1510returns it.
1511
7a85e4df
GM
1512** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1513returned by function `recent-keys'.
1514
02b14400
RS
1515+++
1516** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1517can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1518Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1519etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1520mode.
404fa7d6 1521
02b14400 1522+++
8964fec7
SM
1523** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1524and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1525
02b14400
RS
1526+++
1527** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1528has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1529function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1530returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1531been performed."
1532
1533When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1534and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1535hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1536then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1537
02b14400 1538+++
81da8b32
GM
1539** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1540In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1541and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1542
02b14400 1543+++
9e207b90
GM
1544** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1545with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1546specified table.
1547
1548 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1549
1550Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1551TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1552saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1553what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1554
02b14400 1555+++
d7f89643 1556** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1557Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1558
02b14400 1559+++
dde9e75a
GM
1560** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1561removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1562
02b14400 1563+++
9da30515
GM
1564** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1565instead of being optional.
1566
02b14400 1567+++
d20679eb
GM
1568** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1569modify read-only text.
1570
02b14400 1571+++
fbc164de
PE
1572** New functions and variables for locales.
1573
1574The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1575decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1576time functions like strftime. The new variables
1577`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1578locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1579
1580The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1581environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1582the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1583environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1584not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1585`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1586`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1587
02b14400 1588+++
863476d1
SM
1589** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1590To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1591modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1592start sequences.
1593
02b14400 1594+++
ef6d912c
GM
1595** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1596because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1597
02b14400 1598+++
a933dad1
DL
1599** New function `propertize'
1600
1601The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1602strings with text properties.
1603
1604- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1605
1606Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1607by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1608PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1609specified value of that property. Example:
1610
1611 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1612
1613+++
1614** push and pop macros.
1615
02b14400
RS
1616Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1617are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1618as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1619
1620(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1621(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1622 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1623
02b14400
RS
1624** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1625
6c7fd5aa
RS
1626Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1627are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1628
1629(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1630 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1631 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1632 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1633
1634(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1635 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1636 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1637 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1638
a933dad1
DL
1639+++
1640** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1641as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1642
1643[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1644[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1645[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1646[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1647[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1648 space, and DEL.
1649[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1650 and DEL.
1651[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1652 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1653 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1654[:alpha:] matches letters.
1655 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1656 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1657[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1658[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1659[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1660[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1661 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1662 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1663[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1664[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1665[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1666
1667+++
1668** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1669
1670The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1671
1672- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1673
1674The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1675are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1676
1677:test TEST
1678
1679TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1680Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1681it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1682
1683:size SIZE
1684
1685SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1686many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1687
1688:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1689
1690REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1691full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1692size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
16931.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1694old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1695
1696:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1697
1698THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1699hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1700(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1701
1702:weakness WEAK
1703
1704WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1705Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1706their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1707hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1708
1709- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1710
1711Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1712
1713- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1714
1715Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1716
1717- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1718
1719Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1720values are shared.
1721
1722- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1723
1724Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1725
1726- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1727
1728Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1729
1730- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1731
1732Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1733
1734- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1735
1736Returns the size of TABLE.
1737
1738- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1739
1740Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1741
1742- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1743
1744Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1745
1746- Function: clrhash TABLE
1747
1748Clear TABLE.
1749
1750- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1751
1752Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1753not found.
1754
79214ddf 1755- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1756
1757Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1758another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1759
1760- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1761
1762Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1763
1764- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1765
1766Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1767arguments KEY and VALUE.
1768
1769- Function: sxhash OBJ
1770
1771Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1772
1773- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1774
1775Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1776a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1777comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1778and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1779of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1780
1781TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1782
1783HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1784code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1785integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1786
1787Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1788be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1789
1790 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1791 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1792
1793 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1794 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1795
79214ddf 1796 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1797 'case-fold-string-hash))
1798
1799 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1800
1801+++
1802** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1803
1804It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1805circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1806a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1807
1808+++
1809** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1810
1811If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1812#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1813
a933dad1
DL
1814+++
1815** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1816t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1817specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1818is too short to reach that column.
1819
1820+++
1821** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1822now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1823after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1824two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1825
1826If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1827perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1828and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1829
1830+++
1831** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1832to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1833
1834+++
1835** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1836calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1837
1838+++
1839** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1840directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1841small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1842small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1843temporary-file-directory instead.
1844
1845+++
1846** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1847the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1848`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1849hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1850
1851+++
1852** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1853elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1854
1855+++
1856** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1857
1858make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1859creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1860ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1861
1862+++
1863** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1864
1865The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1866on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1867is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1868never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1869ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1870overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1871
1872If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1873that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1874to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1875The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1876
1877+++
1878** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1879
1880Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1881If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1882ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1883result string.
1884
1885Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1886string where arguments appear in the result string.
1887
1888Example:
1889
1890 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1891 (s2 "world"))
1892 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1893 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1894 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1895
1896results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1897
1898+++
1899** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1900
1901Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1902The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1903argument in it.
1904
1905 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1906 (arg "world"))
1907 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1908 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1909 (message msg arg))
1910
1911+++
1912** Sound support
1913
1914Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1915(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1916
1917Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1918(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1919to enable sound support.
1920
1921Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1922list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1923when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1924functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1925sound to play, before playing the sound.
1926
1927The following sound properties are supported:
1928
1929- `:file FILE'
1930
1931FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1932searched relative to `data-directory'.
1933
6fb40beb
GM
1934- `:data DATA'
1935
1936DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1937may be present, but not both.
1938
a933dad1
DL
1939- `:volume VOLUME'
1940
1941VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
19420..1. This property is optional.
1943
1944Other properties are ignored.
1945
1946** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1947
1948** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1949a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1950
1951** Changes to garbage collection
1952
1953*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1954of live and free strings.
1955
1956*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1957strings that have been consed so far.
1958
a933dad1 1959\f
04545643
GM
1960* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
1961Lisp Manual
1962
0b8a3a6d
DL
1963** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
1964satisfying one of a list of specifications.
1965
1966+++
1967** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
1968optional.
1969
04545643
GM
1970** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
1971
1972When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
1973around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
1974at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
1975properties and overlays that apply to the image.
1976
1977\f
a933dad1
DL
1978* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1979
1980Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1981--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1982When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1983so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1984
f6d3257b
GM
1985** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1986to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1987
1988Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1989text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1990is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1991your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1992laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1993just display it black instead.
1994
1995This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1996a line like
1997
1998 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1999
2000in your `.emacs'.
2001
a933dad1
DL
2002** New face implementation.
2003
2004Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2005font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2006
2007+++
2008*** New faces.
2009
2010Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2011
2012 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2013
a933dad1
DL
2014 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2015 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2016
a933dad1 2017 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2018
a933dad1 2019 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2020
a933dad1 2021 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2022
a933dad1 2023 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2024
a933dad1
DL
2025 7. Background color.
2026
2027 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2028
2029 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2030
2031 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2032
2033 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2034
2035 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2036 color.
2037
2038 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2039 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2040
2041Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2042same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2043frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2044faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2045with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2046attributes mentioned above.
2047
2048There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2049definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2050created frames.
79214ddf 2051
a933dad1
DL
2052A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2053have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2054`fully-specified'.
2055
2056+++
2057*** Face merging.
2058
2059The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2060combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2061aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2062properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2063that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2064results in a fully-specified face.
2065
2066+++
2067*** Face realization.
2068
2069After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2070merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2071realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2072available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2073face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2074cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2075
2076Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2077character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2078for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2079charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2080
2081Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2082specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2083being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2084the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2085statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2086
2087In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2088`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
20890x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2090the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2091initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2092Emacs.
2093
2094Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2095`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2096registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2097with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2098
2099++++
2100**** Clearing face caches.
2101
2102The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2103on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2104unused fonts.
2105
2106+++
2107*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2108
a933dad1
DL
2109Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2110given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2111for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2112
2113If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2114pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2115family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2116property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2117an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2118
2119Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2120against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2121match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2122
2123Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2124
2125The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2126attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2127face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2128names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2129that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2130width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2131to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2132
2133Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2134specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2135face doesn't exist.
2136
2137+++
2138**** Scalable fonts
2139
2140Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2141since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2142servers.
2143
2144To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2145`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2146scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2147Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2148scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2149that list. Example:
2150
2151 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2152
2153allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2154
2155+++
2156*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2157
2158- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2159
2160Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2161is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2162string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2163
2164If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2165the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2166FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2167POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2168SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2169These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2170if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2171REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2172the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2173of the face font sort order.
2174
79214ddf 2175- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2176
2177Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2178omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2179(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2180non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2181
2182- Variable: font-list-limit
2183
2184Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2185won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2186matching font. The default is currently 100.
2187
2188+++
2189*** Setting face attributes.
2190
2191For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2192with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2193implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2194`face-attribute'.
2195
2196Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2197symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2198
2199The following attributes are recognized:
2200
2201`:family'
2202
2203VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2204or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2205and `?' are allowed.
2206
2207`:width'
2208
2209VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2210It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2211`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2212`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2213
2214`:height'
2215
2216VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
22171/10 pt.
2218
2219`:weight'
2220
2221VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2222symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2223`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2224
2225`:slant'
2226
2227VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2228symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2229`reverse-oblique'.
2230
2231`:foreground', `:background'
2232
2233VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2234
2235`:underline'
2236
2237VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2238VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2239a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2240don't underline.
2241
2242`:overline'
2243
2244VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2245VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2246string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2247overline.
2248
2249`:strike-through'
2250
2251VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2252striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2253face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2254is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2255
2256`:box'
2257
2258VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2259around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2260VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2261of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2262and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2263VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2264:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2265the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2266specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2267defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2268the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2269color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2270should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2271like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2272that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2273the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2274box.
2275
2276`:inverse-video'
2277
2278VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2279inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2280
2281`:stipple'
2282
2283If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2284The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2285searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2286HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2287is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2288explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2289
2290For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2291and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2292
2293`:font'
2294
2295Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2296XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2297is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2298versions of Emacs.
2299
2300For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2301be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2302must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2303
2304Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2305`defface'.
2306
2307*** Face attributes and X resources
2308
2309The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2310from X resources:
2311
2312 Face attribute X resource class
2313-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2314 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2315 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2316 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2317 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2318 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2319 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2320 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2321 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2322 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2323 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2324 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2325 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2326 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2327 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2328 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2329 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2330 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2331 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2332 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2333
2334+++
2335*** Text property `face'.
2336
2337The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2338specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2339specification can be
2340
23411. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2342
23432. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2344 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2345 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2346 for face attribute names.
2347
23483. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2349 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2350 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2351
2352+++
2353** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2354
acf3ecb7
EZ
2355The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2356on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2357the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2358default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2359`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2360used to clear the mapping table.
2361
acf3ecb7
EZ
2362** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2363
2364The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2365and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2366type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2367color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2368display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2369old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2370`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2371compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2372should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2373modify their color-related behavior.
2374
2375The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2376any frame type.
2377
8a5719f0
EZ
2378** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2379
2380The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2381`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2382`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2383`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2384`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2385`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2386display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2387the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2388platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2389
a933dad1
DL
2390+++
2391** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2392
463cac2d 2393This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2394
2395The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2396end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2397Otherwise, it returns zero.
2398
463cac2d
GM
2399** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2400
2401There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2402buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2403text-property.
2404
9a9dfda8 2405Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2406forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2407to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2408not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2409commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2410boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2411`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2412functions.
463cac2d
GM
2413
2414Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2415a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2416editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2417
9a9dfda8
GM
2418The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2419
2420- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2421
2422Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2423A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2424If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2425constrained position if that is is different.
2426
2427If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2428positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2429ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2430constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2431as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2432is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2433fields.
2434
2435If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2436NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2437unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2438C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2439only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2440
2441- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2442
2443Erases the field surrounding POS.
2444A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2445If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2446
2447- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2448
2449Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2450A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2451If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2452If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2453field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2454
2455- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2456
2457Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2458A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2459If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2460If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2461then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2462
2463- Function: field-string &optional POS
2464
2465Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2466A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2467If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2468
2469- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2470
2471Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2472A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2473If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2474
a933dad1
DL
2475+++
2476** Image support.
2477
2478Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2479strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2480(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2481replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2482
2483If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2484`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2485AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2486window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2487area.
2488
2489IMAGE is an image specification.
2490
2491*** Image specifications
2492
2493Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2494is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2495specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2496symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2497described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2498
2499The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2500
2501`:ascent ASCENT'
2502
576da55d
GM
2503ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2504If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2505to use for its ascent.
2506
2507If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2508image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2509
04545643
GM
2510If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2511centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2512of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2513overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2514
2515`:margin MARGIN'
2516
79214ddf 2517MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2518margin around the image. Default is 0.
2519
2520`:relief RELIEF'
2521
2522RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2523around an image.
2524
2525`:algorithm ALGO'
2526
2527Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2528be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2529supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2530which is intended to display images "disabled."
2531
2532`:heuristic-mask BG'
2533
2534If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2535background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2536determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2537corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2538the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2539be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2540background of the image.
2541
2542`:file FILE'
2543
2544Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2545search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2546building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2547may be present in the image specification.
2548
518df5c4
GM
2549`:data DATA'
2550
2551Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2552supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2553present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2554support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2555
a933dad1
DL
2556*** Supported image types
2557
b246b1f6 2558**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2559
2560XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2561properties supported are
2562
2563`:foreground FG'
2564
2565FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2566is the frame's foreground.
2567
2568`:background FG'
2569
2570BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2571the frame's background color.
2572
2573XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2574case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2575instead of a `:file' property.
2576
2577`:width WIDTH'
2578
2579WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2580
2581`:height HEIGHT'
2582
2583HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2584
2585`:data DATA'
2586
2587DATA must be either
2588
2589 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2590 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2591
2592 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2593
2594 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2595 bitmap.
2596
c76e04a8
GM
2597 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2598 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2599 in the file.
2600
a933dad1
DL
2601**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2602
2603XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2604`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2605found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2606`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2607
2608Additional image properties supported are:
2609
2610`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2611
2612SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2613name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2614name.
2615
2616XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2617add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2618
a933dad1
DL
2619The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2620to display compressed images.
2621
2622**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2623
2624PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2625mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2626defined.
2627
2628**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2629
2630Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2631package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2632are:
2633
a933dad1
DL
2634**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2635
2636Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2637package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2638properties defined.
2639
2640**** GIF, image type `gif'
2641
2642Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2643`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2644
2645Additional image properties supported are:
2646
2647`:index INDEX'
2648
2649INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2650multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2651
2652This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2653For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2654at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2655every 0.1 seconds.
2656
2657(defun show-anim (file max)
2658 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2659 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2660
2661(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2662 (when (= idx max)
2663 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2664 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2665 (save-excursion
2666 (set-buffer buffer)
2667 (goto-char (point-min))
2668 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2669 (insert-image img "x"))
2670 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2671
2672**** PNG, image type `png'
2673
2674Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2675package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2676properties defined.
2677
2678**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2679
2680Additional image properties supported are:
2681
2682`:pt-width WIDTH'
2683
2684WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2685integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2686
2687`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2688
2689HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2690must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2691
2692`:bounding-box BOX'
2693
2694BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2695the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2696files. This is an required property.
2697
2698Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2699lisp/gs.el.
2700
2701*** Lisp interface.
2702
79214ddf
FP
2703The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2704which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2705
2706Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2707they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2708The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2709manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2710images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2711
2712*** Simplified image API, image.el
2713
2714The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2715creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2716can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2717define an image based on available image types. The functions
2718`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2719buffer.
2720
2721+++
2722** Display margins.
2723
2724Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2725and images.
2726
2727To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2728`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2729`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2730obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2731`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2732the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2733of the display margins.
2734
2735You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2736containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2737one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2738string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2739in this file).
2740
2741+++
2742** Help display
2743
2744Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2745moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2746`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2747that have a `help-echo' property.
2748
2749The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2750items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2751If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2752evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2753tool-bar item is used.
2754
2755The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2756help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2757help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2758
2759+++
2760** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2761
2762The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2763This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2764
2765The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2766scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2767The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2768scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2769used.
2770
79214ddf
FP
2771 (global-set-key [A-down]
2772 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2773 (interactive)
79214ddf 2774 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2775 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2776 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2777 #'(lambda ()
2778 (interactive)
79214ddf 2779 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2780 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2781
2782+++
2783** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2784
2785Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2786when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2787variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2788is called with one argument, POS.
2789
2790At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2791characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2792as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2793property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2794`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2795
2796+++
2797** Tool bar support.
2798
2799Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2800parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2801controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2802suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2803`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2804automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2805
2806*** Tool bar item definitions
2807
2808Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2809`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2810where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2811
a933dad1
DL
2812CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2813evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2814the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2815property (see below).
79214ddf 2816
a933dad1
DL
2817BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2818binding are currently ignored.
2819
2820The following properties are recognized:
2821
2822`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2823
a933dad1
DL
2824FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2825or disabled.
79214ddf 2826
a933dad1 2827`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2828
a933dad1 2829FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2830
a933dad1
DL
2831`:filter FUNCTION'
2832
2833FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2834FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2835used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2836
a933dad1
DL
2837`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2838
2839TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2840and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2841
a933dad1
DL
2842`:image IMAGES'
2843
2844IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2845image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2846meaning of each of the four elements:
2847
2848 Index Use when item is
2849 ----------------------------------------
2850 0 enabled and selected
2851 1 enabled and deselected
2852 2 disabled and selected
2853 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2854
4ba7246d
GM
2855If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2856algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2857
a933dad1 2858`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2859
a933dad1
DL
2860Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2861is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2862
2863*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2864
2865If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2866resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2867than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2868
79214ddf 2869If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2870raised when the mouse moves over them.
2871
2872You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2873`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2874pixels. Default is 1.
2875
2876You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2877`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2878
2879*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2880
2881You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2882a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2883
2884 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2885 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2886 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2887
2888is the original tool bar item definition, then
2889
2890 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2891
2892makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2893item.
2894
2895** Mode line changes.
2896
2897+++
2898*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2899
2900The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2901that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2902a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2903
29041. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2905a `local-map' text property.
2906
29072. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2908that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2909
29103. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2911is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2912`local-map' property.
2913
2914The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2915properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2916example.
2917
54522c9f
GM
2918*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2919evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2920
a933dad1
DL
2921+++
2922*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2923variable mode-line-format to nil.
2924
2925+++
2926*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2927
2928This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2929`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2930completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2931`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2932line.
2933
2934The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2935`header-line'.
2936
2937The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2938position in the header-line.
2939
2940+++
2941** Text property `display'
2942
2943The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2944also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2945`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2946below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2947
2948*** Variable width and height spaces
2949
2950To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2951specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2952`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2953area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2954marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2955displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2956simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2957
2958The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2959PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2960properties described below.
2961
2962The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2963characters having the `display' property.
2964
2965- :width WIDTH
2966
2967Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2968character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2969
2970- :relative-width FACTOR
2971
2972Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2973first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2974same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2975width of that character by FACTOR.
2976
2977- :align-to HPOS
2978
2979Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2980value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2981
2982Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2983
2984- :height HEIGHT
2985
2986Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2987normal line height.
2988
2989- :relative-height FACTOR
2990
2991The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2992of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2993
2994- :ascent ASCENT
2995
2996Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2997used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2998baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2999equal to 100.
3000
3001You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3002
3003*** Images
3004
3005A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3006. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3007in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3008their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3009the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3010`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3011area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3012the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3013as display specification.
3014
3015*** Other display properties
3016
3017- :space-width FACTOR
3018
3019Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3020should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3021integer or float.
3022
3023- :height HEIGHT
3024
3025Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3026
3027If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3028means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3029the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3030``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3031a font is available counts as a step.
3032
3033If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3034as tall as the frame's default font.
3035
3036If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3037height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3038
3039Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3040`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3041
3042- :raise FACTOR
3043
3044FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3045font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3046raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3047amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3048`:height' subproperty.
3049
3050*** Conditional display properties
3051
3052All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3053has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3054applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3055During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3056the text having the `display' property.
3057
3058The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3059`(:when t SPEC)'.
3060
3061+++
3062** New menu separator types.
3063
3064Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3065item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3066treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3067to specify other menu separator types.
3068
3069- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3070
3071No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3072separator occurs.
3073
3074- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3075
3076A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3077
3078- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3079
3080A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3081
3082- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3083
3084A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3085
3086- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3087
3088A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3089
3090- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3091
3092A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3093displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3094
3095- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3096
3097A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3098
3099- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3100
3101A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3102
3103- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3104
3105A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3106
3107- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3108
3109Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3110
3111- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3112
3113Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3114
3115- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3116
3117Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3118
3119- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3120
3121Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3122
3123Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3124the corresponding single-line separators.
3125
3126+++
3127** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3128
3129The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3130`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3131Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3132that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3133default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3134default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3135default foreground is black.
3136
3137The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3138(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3139`ScrollBarBackground').
3140
3141Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3142settings for scroll bar colors.
3143
3144+++
3145** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3146display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3147
3148---
3149** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3150starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3151on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3152line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3153the original window start.
3154
3155---
3156** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3157`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3158now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3159
3160+++
3161** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3162
3163A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3164`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3165windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3166other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3167
3168The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3169fixed-width and fixed-height.
3170
3171 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3172
3173A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3174fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3175window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3176change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3177temporarily to nil, for example
3178
3179 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3180 (enlarge-window 10))
3181
79214ddf 3182Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3183or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3184
3185** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3186terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3187to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3188overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3189horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3190support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3191^L
3192* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3193
3194** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3195input.
3196
3197** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3198
3199** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3200
3201** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3202only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3203exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3204(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3205(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3206
3207** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3208been added.
3209
3210^L
3211* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3212
3213** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3214
e33b0397
DL
3215^L
3216* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3217
3218** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3219M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3220\f
3221* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3222
3223** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3224
3225You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3226Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3227`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3228
3229If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3230is the one that is used.
3231
3232** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3233the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3234Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3235separate from the command's regular output.
3236Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3237says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3238In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3239the buffer name.
3240
3241When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3242output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3243it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3244cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3245
3246** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3247the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3248is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3249created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3250
3251** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3252example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3253match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3254quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3255
3256** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3257now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3258if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3259they never ignore case.
3260
3261** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3262under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3263applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3264of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3265just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3266convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3267part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3268
3269If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3270the same format that was used in the file before.
3271
3272You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3273`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3274
3275** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3276renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3277This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3278
3279** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3280The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3281buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3282your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3283is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3284end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3285Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3286
3287The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3288eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3289control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3290format. You can now customize these variables.
3291
3292** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3293filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3294filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3295enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3296
3297** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3298in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3299windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3300
3301** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3302dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3303doesn't have any effect.
3304
3305** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3306not one per buffer.
3307
3308** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3309use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3310 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3311
3312** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3313To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3314`auto-show-mode' command.
3315
3316** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3317avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3318versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3319choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3320occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3321
3322** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3323cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3324
3325** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3326character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3327feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3328
3329** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3330the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3331interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3332and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3333
3334** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3335
3336The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3337that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3338one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3339codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3340set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3341
3342Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3343from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3344
3345IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3346equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3347a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3348`?' on other systems.
3349
3350IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3351feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3352Unix.
3353
3354Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3355current codepage when it starts.
3356
3357** Mail changes
3358
feab4fba
GM
3359*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3360`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3361appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3362non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3363MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3364headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3365latin-1:
3366
3367 MIME-version: 1.0
3368 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3369 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3370
a933dad1
DL
3371*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3372default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3373default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3374sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3375buffer-file-coding-system.
3376
3377You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3378sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3379mail.
3380
3381*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3382if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3383Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3384list of possible coding systems.
3385
3386** CC Mode changes
3387
3388*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3389modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3390longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3391docstring for details.
3392
3393*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3394symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3395found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3396prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3397lineup functions use this feature currently.
3398
3399*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3400"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3401
3402*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3403"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3404
3405*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3406from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3407symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3408c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3409anonymous classes.
3410
3411*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3412syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3413
3414*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3415inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3416support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3417function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3418
3419*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3420(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3421brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3422c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3423(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3424
3425*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3426
3427*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3428
3429*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3430for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3431
3432*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3433
3434*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3435associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3436This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3437circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3438class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3439
3440** Gnus changes.
3441
3442*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3443added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3444Gnus manual for the full story.
3445
3446*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3447before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3448group, which is created automatically.
3449
3450*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3451values.
3452
3453*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3454
3455*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3456outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3457
3458*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3459`C-u C-c C-c'.
3460
3461*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3462
3463*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3464re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3465
3466*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3467
3468*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3469Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3470
3471*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3472`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3473
3474*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3475control over simplification.
3476
3477*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3478
3479*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3480limit.
3481
3482*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3483
3484*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3485
79214ddf 3486*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3487If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3488rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3489
3490*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3491`a' forces normal posting method.
3492
3493*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3494-- `W d'.
3495
3496*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3497to a non-nil value.
3498
3499*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3500where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3501
3502*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3503has been added.
3504
3505*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3506
3507*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3508
3509*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3510`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3511
3512*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3513`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3514
3515*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3516
3517*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3518been added.
3519
3520*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3521`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3522
3523*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3524updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3525
3526*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3527
3528*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3529
3530*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3531
3532** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3533
3534*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3535options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3536nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3537
3538*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3539TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3540of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3541TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3542can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3543
3544*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3545All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3546but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3547the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3548
3549*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3550the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3551buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3552mismatch.
3553
3554** Changes to RefTeX mode
3555
3556*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3557file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3558
3559*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3560lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3561characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3562removed from the label.
3563
3564*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3565a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3566
3567*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3568customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3569
3570*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3571`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3572expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3573
3574*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3575
3576** New/deleted modes and packages
3577
3578*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3579SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3580
3581*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3582editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3583SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3584
3585*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3586changes with a special face.
3587
3588*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3589this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3590Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3591\f
3592* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3593
3594** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3595This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3596conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3597and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3598check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3599
3600The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3601Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3602distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3603
3604** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3605MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3606controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3607directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3608Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3609on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3610string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3611program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3612printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3613
3614** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3615output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3616available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3617input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3618temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3619program.
3620
3621An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3622and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3623programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3624automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3625as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3626ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3627
3628** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3629a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3630MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3631was not documented clearly before.
3632
3633** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3634This includes Tetris and Snake.
3635\f
3636* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3637
3638** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3639return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3640They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3641meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3642
3643** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3644WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3645and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3646
3647** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3648
3649*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3650It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3651
3652*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3653the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3654integers.
3655
3656** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3657files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3658arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3659file names and attributes are returned.
3660
3661** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3662sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3663accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3664It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3665returns the result.
3666
3667** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3668to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3669
3670** New functions for base64 conversion:
3671
3672The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3673into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3674performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3675optionally.
3676
3677Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3678job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3679
3680**
3681The new function process-running-child-p
3682will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3683terminal to its own child process.
3684
3685** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3686when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3687to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3688itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3689
3690** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3691be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3692
3693** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3694:included is an alias for :visible.
3695
3696easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3697easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3698to move or copy menu entries.
3699
3700** Multibyte editing changes
3701
3702*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3703an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3704make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3705work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3706char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3707 (setq char (sref str idx)
3708 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3709The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3710
3711If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3712(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3713 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3714
3715*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3716region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3717deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3718
3719 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3720
3721This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3722across the boundary.
3723
3724*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3725`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3726 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3727 contains 8-bit characters.
3728 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3729 contains invalid characters.
3730
3731*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3732text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3733preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3734text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3735way.
3736
3737*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3738If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3739end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3740prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3741
3742*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3743compose Thai characters in a string.
3744
3745** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3746argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3747for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3748menus should always use the third argument.
3749
3750** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3751read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3752arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3753input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3754
3755** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3756of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3757programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3758inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3759
3760** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3761the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3762returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3763echo area contents.
3764
3765 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3766
3767** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3768NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3769requested feature cannot be loaded.
3770
3771** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3772foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3773means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3774
3775** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3776gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3777
3778** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3779read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3780unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3781end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3782
3783** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3784the gap of the current buffer.
3785
3786** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3787to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3788current buffer.
3789
3790** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3791facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3792These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3793it back in after any modifications have been made.
3794\f
3795* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3796
3797** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3798the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3799/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3800directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3801subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3802
3803Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3804names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3805Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3806which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3807these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3808
3809Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3810starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3811time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3812
3813This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3814Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3815to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3816subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3817`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3818results.
3819
3820** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3821GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3822that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3823fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3824\f
3825* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3826
3827** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3828including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3829it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3830perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3831
3832** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3833specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3834region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3835further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3836command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3837within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3838are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3839region.
3840
3841In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3842selective undo.
3843
3844** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3845unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3846buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3847effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3848Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3849
3850The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3851though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3852-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3853load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3854
3855** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3856no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3857enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3858something that most users not do.
3859
3860** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3861operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3862The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3863applications.
3864
3865C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3866pasting operations.
3867
3868** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3869setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3870like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3871printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3872`ps-printer-name'.
3873
3874** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3875minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3876any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3877except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3878incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3879hits a new word.
3880
3881Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3882Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3883to be confused by TeX commands.
3884
3885You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3886correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3887clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3888of various alternative replacements and actions.
3889
3890Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3891the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3892corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3893alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3894flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3895
3896Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3897flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3898
3899** Changes in input method usage.
3900
3901Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3902the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3903respectively.
3904
3905You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3906
3907If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3908of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3909
3910The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3911that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3912
3913 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3914
3915 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3916
3917 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3918 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3919
3920 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3921 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3922 o When you are using a complex input method.
3923 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3924
3925If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3926input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3927and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3928setting it to t is helpful.
3929
3930The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3931
3932In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3933keys:
3934 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3935 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3936 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3937These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3938environment.
3939
3940** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3941names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3942minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3943get
3944
3945 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3946
3947which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3948
3949Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3950Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3951
3952** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3953at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3954its owner and group.
3955
3956** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3957Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3958
3959** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3960contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3961
3962** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3963which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3964in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3965by the left edge of the rectangle.
3966
3967** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3968increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3969C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3970for writing keyboard macros.
3971
3972** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3973files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3974frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3975the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3976additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3977info.
3978
3979** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3980
3981** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3982query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3983contents only.
3984
3985** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3986confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3987the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3988says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3989
3990** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3991non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3992literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3993
3994** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3995now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3996Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3997inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3998
3999** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4000failure if the command produces no output.
4001
4002** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4003manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4004the mouse.
4005
4006** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4007mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4008function and variable names.
4009
4010** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4011reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4012file-coding-system-alist.
4013
4014** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4015t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4016converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4017the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4018according to the current fontset.
4019
4020** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4021
4022The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4023that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4024nonascii-insert-offset.
4025
4026For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4027enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4028nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4029characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4030
4031** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4032an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4033
4034** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4035letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4036
4037** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4038are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4039command keys.
4040
4041** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4042user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4043
4044Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4045user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4046all variables that have documentation.
4047
4048** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4049shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4050that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4051minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4052it should show; the default is 20.
4053
4054Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4055the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4056of your input.
4057
4058** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4059all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4060recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4061argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4062the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4063Newly added options are included as well.
4064
4065If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4066then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4067for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4068
4069This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4070Customize menu.
4071
4072** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4073the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4074
4075** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4076buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4077invoked.
4078
4079** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4080that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4081The default is 1.
4082
4083** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4084syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4085new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4086(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4087sensibly.
4088
4089** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4090
4091** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4092value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4093two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4094
4095** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4096reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4097for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4098every night.
4099
7464346d
GM
4100** Desktop changes
4101
4102*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4103the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4104
7464346d
GM
4105*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4106and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4107
a933dad1
DL
4108** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4109read and post multi-lingual articles.
4110
4111** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4112doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4113be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4114outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4115the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4116made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4117
4118** Mail reading and sending changes
4119
4120*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4121the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4122changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4123toggle.
4124
4125*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4126now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4127summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4128the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4129rmail-default-body-file.
4130
4131*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4132longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4133handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4134
4135*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4136it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4137is evaluated to insert the signature.
4138
4139*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4140outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4141handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4142putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4143transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4144especially interested in trying feedmail.
4145
4146feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4147feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4148provided by feedmail are:
4149
4150**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4151stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4152there is also a queue for draft messages
4153
4154**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4155be prompted for confirmation
4156
4157**** does smart filling of address headers
4158
4159**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4160the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4161can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4162
4163**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4164the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4165/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4166function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4167
4168** Dired changes
4169
4170*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4171files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4172
4173*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4174run Dired on the directory name at point.
4175
4176*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4177files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4178for a specified regexp.
4179
4180** VC Changes
4181
4182*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4183conveniently.
4184
4185*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4186faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4187Dired.
4188
4189VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4190directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4191listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4192currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4193
4194You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4195then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4196vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4197control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4198on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4199
4200All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4201is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4202`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4203the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4204`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4205
4206The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4207toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4208VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4209`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4210
4211Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4212ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4213command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4214
4215*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4216file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4217session to resolve them.
4218
4219Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4220resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4221contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4222uses as well).
4223
4224*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4225command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4226you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4227either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4228branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4229If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4230using ediff.
4231
4232** Changes in Font Lock
4233
4234*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4235are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4236use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4237unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4238compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4239
4240** Frame name display changes
4241
4242*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4243frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4244raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4245when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4246
4247*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4248frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4249menu.
4250
4251** Comint (subshell) changes
4252
4253*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4254subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4255with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4256
4257*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4258
4259C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4260that is, the line after the last line you got.
4261You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4262
4263C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4264send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4265the following line.
4266
4267C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4268which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4269previously sent input.
4270
4271C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4272it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4273as the search string.
4274
4275*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4276automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4277
4278** C mode changes
4279
4280*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4281and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4282assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4283definition.
a933dad1
DL
4284
4285*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4286(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4287Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4288style is still the default however.
4289
4290*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4291
4292*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4293are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4294them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4295
4296*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4297and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4298
4299*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4300namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4301
4302*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4303makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4304
4305*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4306c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4307
4308*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4309should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4310package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4311variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4312
4313** Changes to hippie-expand.
4314
79214ddf 4315*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4316non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4317which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4318
4319*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4320non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4321expanding dynamically.
4322
4323*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4324non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4325
4326*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4327non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4328this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4329expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4330
4331*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4332
4333** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4334
4335*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4336bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4337automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4338bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4339against the first word in the title.
4340
4341*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4342capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4343bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4344lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4345lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4346bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4347
4348*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4349generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4350replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4351bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4352
4353** Changes in vcursor.el.
4354
4355*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4356and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4357variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4358entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4359`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4360in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4361
4362*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4363Editing group once the package is loaded.
4364
4365*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4366generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4367vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4368
4369*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4370vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4371
4372** Ispell changes.
4373
79214ddf
FP
4374*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4375buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4376are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4377
4378*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4379A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4380and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4381defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4382include:
a933dad1
DL
4383
4384 o URLs are automatically skipped
4385 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4386
4387*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4388
4389** Changes to RefTeX mode
4390
4391RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4392large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4393re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4394section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4395
4396*** New recursive parser.
4397
4398The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4399entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4400recursive parser scans the individual files.
4401
4402*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4403
a933dad1
DL
4404Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4405partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4406the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4407
4408 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4409
4410*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4411
4412This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4413
4414 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4415
4416*** Using multiple selection buffers
4417
4418If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4419for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4420
4421 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4422
4423*** References to external documents.
4424
4425The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4426documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4427documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4428macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4429RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4430the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4431The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4432
4433*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4434
4435The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4436and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4437
4438Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4439the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4440
4441*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4442
4443The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4444buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4445
4446*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4447
4448The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4449contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4450`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4451have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4452enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4453at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4454more.
4455
4456*** Support for the varioref package
4457
4458The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4459
4460*** New hooks
4461
4462Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4463and citations are created. These hooks are
4464`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4465`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4466
4467*** Citations outside LaTeX
4468
4469The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4470a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4471
4472*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4473
4474The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4475fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4476fontified, use
4477
4478 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4479
4480** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4481With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4482the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4483directories that contain the same file name.
4484
4485Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4486Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4487file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4488Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4489have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4490names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4491directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4492directory.
4493
4494** New modes and packages
4495
4496*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4497It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4498it, but some do not.
4499
4500*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4501code.
4502
4503*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4504current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4505around in a buffer.
4506
4507Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4508
4509*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4510uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4511be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4512established system of notation similar to Chess.
4513
4514*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4515documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4516guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4517
4518*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4519available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4520system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4521simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4522functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4523the like.
4524
4525*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4526identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4527
4528*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4529within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4530used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4531the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4532
4533*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4534
4535 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4536 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4537 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4538 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4539 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4540 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4541 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4542 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4543 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4544 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4545 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4546
4547 Platform-specific modes:
4548
4549 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4550 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4551 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4552 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4553 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4554 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4555 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4556 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4557 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4558\f
4559* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4560
4561** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4562use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4563That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4564Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4565
4566Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4567you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4568consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4569
4570** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4571and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4572specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4573searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4574
4575** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4576multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4577character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4578environment.
4579
4580** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4581take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4582string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4583current input method for reading this one event.
4584
4585** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4586now control whether to output certain characters as
4587backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4588non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4589characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4590in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4591\f
4592* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4593
4594** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4595of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4596
4597** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4598in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4599always increases point by 1.
4600
4601The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4602considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4603
4604See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4605
4606** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4607Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4608default value changed. For example,
4609
4610 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4611 :type 'integer
4612 :group 'foo
4613 :version "20.3")
4614
79214ddf 4615 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4616 :version "20.3")
4617
4618If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4619default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4620is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4621`:version' in the top level group.
4622
4623This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4624
4625** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4626starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4627
4628However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4629symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4630support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4631to themselves.
4632
4633If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4634this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4635values whatever.
4636
4637** There is a new debugger command, R.
4638It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4639in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4640
4641** Frame-local variables.
4642
4643You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4644the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4645local bindings for that variable.
4646
4647These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4648frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4649modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4650parameter name.
4651
4652Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4653Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4654active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4655that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4656
4657It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4658clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4659very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4660through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4661
4662** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4663"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4664evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4665makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4666See the documentation in sregex.el.
4667
4668** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4669is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4670parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4671The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4672
4673** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4674If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4675
4676** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4677known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4678define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4679
4680** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4681when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4682it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4683history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4684
4685The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4686return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4687empty input.
4688
4689** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4690for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4691`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4692Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4693`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4694
4695** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4696echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4697a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4698default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4699
4700** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4701specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4702function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4703place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4704non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4705
4706** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4707If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4708up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4709end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4710
4711** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4712which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4713If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4714
4715** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4716holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4717was directed to display this buffer.
4718
4719** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4720with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4721describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4722other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4723set-window-configuration.
4724
4725** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4726window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4727positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4728windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4729
4730** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4731override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4732look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4733
4734If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4735non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4736map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4737
4738minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4739and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4740
4741** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4742except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4743
4744** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4745USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4746floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4747
4748** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4749to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4750in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4751it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4752
4753** Menu changes
4754
4755*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4756keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4757better supported.
4758
4759The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4760a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4761you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4762can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4763then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4764
4765*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4766
4767In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4768 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4769defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4770starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4771
4772The format is:
4773 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4774 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4775where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4776string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4777The supported properties include
4778
4779:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4780 item is enabled.
4781:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4782 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4783:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4784 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4785 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4786 It should return a binding to use instead.
4787:keys DESCRIPTION
4788 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4789 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4790 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4791:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4792 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4793 keyboard binding.
4794:key-sequence nil
4795 This means that the command normally has no
4796 keyboard equivalent.
4797:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4798:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4799 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4800 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4801 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4802
4803Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4804Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4805
4806(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4807
4808** New event types
4809
4810*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4811mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4812corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4813which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4814
4815 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4816
4817where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4818same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4819indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4820negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4821the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4822forward, away from the user.
4823
4824As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4825
4826*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4827files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4828and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4829filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4830loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4831
4832 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4833
4834where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4835same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4836that were dragged and dropped.
4837
4838As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4839
4840** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4841
4842*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4843any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4844to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4845
4846*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4847can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4848that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4849
4850*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4851in Emacs 19 and before.
4852
4853The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4854The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4855
4856*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4857buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4858unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4859representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4860
4861This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4862as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4863viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4864one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4865will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4866
4867This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4868representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4869(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4870consistent with the new representation.
4871
4872*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4873representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4874about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4875however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4876
4877The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4878nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4879using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4880
4881*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4882representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4883representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4884
4885The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4886loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4887is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4888
4889*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4890which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4891
4892*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4893which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4894
4895*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4896portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4897so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4898You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4899
4900*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4901it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4902
4903*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4904convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4905buffer or string being searched.
4906
4907One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4908[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4909searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4910searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4911obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4912you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4913expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4914
4915*** Structure of coding system changed.
4916
4917All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4918by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4919which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4920as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4921vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4922your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4923define-coding-system-alias.
4924
4925The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4926the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4927access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4928pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4929character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4930safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4931'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4932`iso-8859-1'.
4933
4934Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4935The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4936coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4937(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4938
4939Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4940also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4941are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4942the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4943
4944*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4945proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4946This function requires a user interaction.
4947
4948*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4949find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4950select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4951systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4952a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4953select-safe-coding-system.
4954
4955*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4956decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4957last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4958was done.
4959
4960*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4961used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4962coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4963
4964*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4965return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4966characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4967`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4968
4969*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4970coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4971coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4972converted.
4973
4974*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4975coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4976
4977*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4978character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4979character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4980each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4981either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4982range of characters.
4983
4984*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4985Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4986
4987*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4988in the current buffer at position POS.
4989
4990*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4991input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4992function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4993character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4994event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4995binding input-method-function to nil.
4996
4997The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4998method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4999input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5000the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5001not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5002
5003The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5004subsequent events of a key sequence.
5005
5006*** You can customize any language environment by using
5007set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5008
5009The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5010customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5011instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5012environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5013exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5014\f
5015* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5016
5017** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5018options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5019at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5020tree structure.
5021
5022M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5023user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5024
5025With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5026session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5027in your .emacs file.)
5028
5029** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5030You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5031
5032** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5033This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5034
5035** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5036immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5037kills the region.
5038
5039The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5040delete the character before point, as usual.
5041
5042** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5043on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5044by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5045
5046** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5047insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5048the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5049onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5050history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5051past.)
5052
5053** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5054This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5055in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5056TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5057makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5058
5059As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5060and is an alias for it.
5061
5062If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5063use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5064
5065** Scrolling changes
5066
5067*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5068position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5069
5070In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5071on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5072where it started.
5073
5074*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5075move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5076screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5077does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5078
5079*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5080top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5081comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5082recenters the window.
5083
5084** International character set support (MULE)
5085
5086Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5087including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5088Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5089Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5090features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5091MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5092
5093Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5094coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5095character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5096variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5097into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5098
5099Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5100generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5101supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5102language, to make it possible to type them.
5103
5104The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5105character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5106
5107The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5108to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5109
5110You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5111
5112 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5113
5114Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5115characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5116argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5117already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5118characters for their work until they want to change.
5119
5120*** Input methods
5121
5122An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5123specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5124has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5125the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5126support several input methods.
5127
5128The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5129another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5130work.
5131
5132A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5133characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5134composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5135consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5136sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5137letter.
5138
5139The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5140by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5141First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5142marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5143mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5144
5145None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5146they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5147phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5148converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5149
5150Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5151word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5152typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5153the first guess is wrong.
5154
5155*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5156turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5157
5158If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5159byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5160they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5161the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5162
5163However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5164use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5165includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5166translate automatically to and from either one.
5167
5168*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5169
5170Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5171file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5172sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5173what you want.
5174
5175If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5176example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5177system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5178multibyte characters in that buffer.
5179
5180If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5181character conversion as well.
5182
5183*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5184
5185A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5186Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5187requires using many fonts.
5188
5189Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5190collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5191
5192A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5193the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5194have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5195you would use a font.
5196
5197If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5198specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5199display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5200
5201The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5202(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5203characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5204or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5205and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5206
5207*** Defining fontsets.
5208
5209Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5210chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5211with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5212
5213Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5214of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5215`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5216standard fontset are created automatically.
5217
5218If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5219argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5220FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5221with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5222name is `fontset-startup'.
5223
5224Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5225The resource value should have this form:
5226 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5227FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5228 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5229 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5230 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5231The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5232of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5233CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5234FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5235
5236Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5237last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5238You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5239
5240For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5241font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5242following resource,
5243 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5244the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5245 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5246Here is the substitution rule:
5247 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5248 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5249 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5250 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5251 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5252
5253The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5254fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5255that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5256
5257With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5258like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5259name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5260fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5261fontsets.
5262
5263*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5264defaults for a particular choice of language.
5265
5266Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5267method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5268visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5269already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5270language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5271system for new files that you create.
5272
5273It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5274set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5275whole Emacs session.
5276
5277For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5278chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5279with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5280
5281*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5282specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5283specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5284the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5285coding systems that Emacs supports.
5286
5287*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5288lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5289This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5290After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5291is used for *the immediately following command*.
5292
5293So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5294write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5295
5296If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5297then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5298
5299For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5300visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5301
5302*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5303construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5304to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5305specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5306of the file.
5307
5308*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5309the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5310code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5311translated into that character code.
5312
5313This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5314various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5315
5316By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5317
5318*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5319the coding system for keyboard input.
5320
5321Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5322with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5323some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5324
5325By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5326
5327Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5328input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5329translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5330to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5331designed to work with terminals.
5332
5333*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5334specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5335This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5336has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5337translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5338in the corresponding buffer.
5339
5340By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5341
5342*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5343to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5344It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5345
5346*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5347an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5348command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5349want to use.
5350
5351C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5352method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5353
5354*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5355layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5356remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5357which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5358
5359*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5360the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5361related information.
5362
5363*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5364HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5365scripts.
5366
5367*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5368information about the support for a particular language.
5369You specify the language as an argument.
5370
5371*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5372the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5373first dash.
5374
5375A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5376(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5377whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
53781 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5379
5380 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5381 B big5 (Chinese)
5382 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5383 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5384 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5385 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5386 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5387 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5388 K euc-korea (Korean)
5389 R koi8 (Russian)
5390 Q tibetan
5391 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5392 T lao
5393 T tis620 (Thai)
5394 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5395 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5396 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5397 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5398 z hz (Chinese)
5399
5400When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5401two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5402coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5403keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5404
5405*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5406conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5407
5408When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5409into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5410rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5411Rmail files themselves.
5412
5413*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5414conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5415
5416Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5417for sending mail:
5418
5419- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5420- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5421- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5422 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5423- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5424
5425*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5426to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5427Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5428translations.
5429
5430** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5431of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5432insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5433without any conversion.
5434
5435** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5436You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5437RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5438any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5439
5440** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5441functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5442
5443Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5444Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5445
5446Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5447mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5448
5449** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5450complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5451in the buffer before point.
5452
5453With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5454symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5455you are using.
5456
5457With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5458just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5459
5460** File locking works with NFS now.
5461
5462The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5463in the same directory as FILENAME.
5464
5465This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5466works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5467can become a bottleneck.
5468
5469The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5470does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5471create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5472file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5473rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5474so useful that the change is worth while.
5475
5476When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5477are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5478collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5479tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5480
5481** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5482it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5483show-paren-mode.
5484
5485** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5486selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5487delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5488
5489** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5490within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5491complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5492
5493** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5494it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5495set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5496
5497** Changes in View mode.
5498
5499*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5500Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5501
5502*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5503view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5504
5505*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5506previous state.
5507
5508*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5509scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5510
5511*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5512non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5513not just the selected window.
5514
5515*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5516read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5517turns View mode on or off.
5518
5519*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5520how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5521delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5522
5523** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5524now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5525
5526** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5527has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5528presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5529which version to compare with.
5530
5531** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5532blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5533
5534The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5535is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5536isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5537shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5538
5539By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5540of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5541blocks, all of them or none.
5542
5543** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5544current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5545confirmation first.
5546
5547** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5548now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5549However, the mode will not be changed if
5550(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5551(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5552 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5553(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5554
5555This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5556
5557However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5558these commands do not change the major mode.
5559
5560** M-x occur changes.
5561
5562*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5563it performs a case-sensitive search.
5564
5565*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5566if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5567using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5568
5569** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5570in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5571window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5572that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5573buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5574
5575** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5576after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5577appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5578come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5579
5580** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5581selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5582buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5583
5584** Outline mode changes.
5585
5586*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5587
5588*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5589
5590** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5591you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5592Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5593was already active.
5594
5595The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5596unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5597get confused by it.
5598
5599If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5600set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5601
5602** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5603
5604*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5605conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5606character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5607including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5608
5609The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5610mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5611copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5612
5613*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5614are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5615values.
5616
5617`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5618case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5619`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5620case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5621
5622** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5623certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5624can be. The default value is 30.
5625
5626** Changes in Mail mode.
5627
5628*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5629Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5630composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5631`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5632`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5633behavior.
5634
5635C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5636compose-mail-other-frame.
5637
5638*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5639the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5640replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5641buffer that shows the original message.
5642
5643*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5644with separator lines around the contents.
5645
5646*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5647in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5648definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5649need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5650
5651*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5652
5653**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5654for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5655controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5656Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5657
5658**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5659to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5660/etc/passwd.
5661
5662**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5663to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5664/etc/passwd.
5665
5666** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5667special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5668directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5669reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5670
5671Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5672when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5673be taken to be magic.
5674
5675** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5676files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5677available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5678
5679M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5680(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5681
5682** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5683suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5684
5685In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5686
5687new key dired.el binding old key
5688------- ---------------- -------
5689 * c dired-change-marks c
5690 * m dired-mark m
5691 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5692 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5693 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5694 * u dired-unmark u
5695 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5696 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5697 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5698 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5699 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5700 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5701
5702** Rmail changes.
5703
5704*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5705saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5706chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5707each time you run it.
5708
5709*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5710whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5711
5712*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5713messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5714means to move in the opposite direction.
5715
5716*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5717you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5718
5719*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5720just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5721It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5722can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5723for output.
5724
5725** Gnus changes.
5726
5727*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5728
79214ddf
FP
5729*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5730Gnus.
a933dad1 5731
79214ddf 5732*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5733`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5734
5735*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5736article mode line.
5737
5738*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5739
5740*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5741
5742(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5743
5744*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5745are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5746`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5747
5748*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5749
5750*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5751
5752*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5753See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5754
5755*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5756Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5757used to pick articles.
5758
5759*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5760another have been added.
5761
5762 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5763
5764*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5765generating lines in buffers.
5766
5767*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5768`M-C-_'.
5769
5770*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5771
5772*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5773
5774 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5775
5776*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5777
a933dad1
DL
5778 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5779
5780*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5781Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5782
5783*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5784the native server.
5785
5786 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5787
5788*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5789(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5790
5791*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5792
5793*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5794even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5795
5796*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5797(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5798
5799 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5800 a group.
5801
5802*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5803sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5804
5805 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5806
5807*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5808
5809 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5810
5811*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5812
a933dad1
DL
5813 Use the `Y c' command.
5814
5815*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5816
5817*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5818
5819 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5820
5821*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5822from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5823
a933dad1
DL
5824 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5825
5826*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5827
5828*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5829the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5830
5831 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5832
5833Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5834and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5835from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5836hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5837this issue.)
5838
5839Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5840automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5841particular news group. This can be done by:
5842
5843 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5844
5845Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5846of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5847"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5848system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5849for reading and posting).
5850
5851CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5852 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5853Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5854newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5855there.
5856
5857Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5858default. Here are some of these default settings:
5859
5860 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5861 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5862 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5863 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5864 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5865
5866When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5867the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5868
5869** CC mode changes.
5870
5871*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5872code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5873values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5874this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5875Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5876loaded.
5877
5878If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5879Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5880style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5881share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5882c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5883must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5884
5885*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5886of the current buffer.
5887
5888*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5889it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5890of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5891
5892*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5893style that the Python developers like.
5894
5895*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5896This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5897just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5898
5899** VC Changes [new]
5900
5901** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5902name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5903directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5904
5905This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5906master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5907developers.
5908
5909You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5910RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5911
5912*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5913other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5914writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5915calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5916
5917*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5918version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5919
5920** Calendar changes.
5921
5922A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5923of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5924for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5925
5926** ps-print changes
5927
79214ddf 5928There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5929
5930*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5931
5932The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5933formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5934`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5935`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5936It defaults to `letter'.
5937If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5938
5939The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5940of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5941non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5942
5943The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5944It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5945It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5946
5947*** Horizontal layout
5948
5949The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5950`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5951All are measured in points.
5952
5953*** Vertical layout
5954
5955The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5956`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5957All are measured in points.
5958
5959*** Headers
5960
5961If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5962`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5963margin above the text.
5964
79214ddf 5965If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5966framing box is printed around the header.
5967
5968The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5969`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5970
79214ddf
FP
5971The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5972`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5973`ps-header-font-size'.
5974
5975*** Font managing
5976
5977The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5978used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5979`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5980elements to this alist.
5981
79214ddf 5982The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5983for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5984
5985** hideshow changes.
5986
5987*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5988C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5989
5990*** Support for java-mode added.
5991
5992*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5993in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5994
5995*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5996the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5997way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5998
5999*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6000robust and a lot faster.
6001
79214ddf 6002*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6003
6004*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6005to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6006documentation for more details.
6007
6008** Changes in Enriched mode.
6009
6010*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6011filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6012of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6013use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6014the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6015
6016*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6017distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6018as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6019as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6020
6021** Font Lock mode
6022
6023*** Custom support
6024
6025The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6026font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6027faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6028group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6029your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6030consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6031
6032You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6033
6034*** Maximum decoration
6035
6036Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6037default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6038of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6039supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6040to get the old behavior.
6041
6042*** New support
6043
6044Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6045
6046Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6047support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6048
6049*** Configurable support
6050
6051Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6052additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6053c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6054java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6055list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6056of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6057convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6058
6059Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6060way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6061it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6062
6063*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6064
6065You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6066highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6067for any mode.
6068
6069For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6070
6071 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6072
6073in your ~/.emacs.
6074
6075*** New faces
6076
6077Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6078font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6079distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6080to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6081
6082*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6083
6084The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6085cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6086same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6087
6088*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6089
6090The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6091according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6092the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6093non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6094refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6095the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6096Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6097
6098This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6099For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6100this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6101refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6102containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6103the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6104
6105As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6106
6107Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6108Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6109Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6110new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6111
6112If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6113settings.
6114
6115** Ada mode changes.
6116
6117*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6118If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6119procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6120you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6121stubs.
6122
6123*** There are two new commands:
6124 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6125 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6126
6127The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6128`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6129`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6130
6131*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6132is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6133Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6134
6135*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6136formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6137places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6138space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6139
6140** Scheme mode changes.
6141
6142*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6143mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6144for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6145with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6146have any effect.
6147
6148If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6149still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6150scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6151variables as buffer-local variables.
6152
6153*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6154Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6155
133c9e59
GM
6156** Changes to the emacsclient program
6157
875c1439
GM
6158*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6159USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6160associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6161can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6162
133c9e59 6163*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6164it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6165buffer in Emacs.
6166
133c9e59
GM
6167*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6168use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6169ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6170option takes precedence.
6171
a933dad1
DL
6172** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6173constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6174(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6175
6176** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6177which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6178the current defun.
6179
6180** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6181following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6182
6183** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6184and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6185necessary).
6186
6187** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6188if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6189these register values no longer become completely useless.
6190If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6191asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6192it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6193
6194** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6195example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6196be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6197you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6198
6199You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6200variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6201file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6202revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6203only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6204
6205** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6206since it applies only to the current frame.
6207
6208** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6209file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6210and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6211
6212This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6213multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6214variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6215tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6216instead of just the file you are editing.
6217
6218** RefTeX mode
6219
6220RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6221and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6222different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6223multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6224turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6225
79214ddf 6226C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6227 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6228 knows which kind of label is needed.
6229
6230C-c ) reftex-reference
6231 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6232 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6233
6234C-c [ reftex-citation
6235 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6236 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6237
6238C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6239 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6240
6241C-c = reftex-toc
6242 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6243 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6244
a933dad1
DL
6245Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6246commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6247Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6248reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6249C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6250
6251** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6252
6253*** Info documentation is now available.
6254
6255*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6256both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6257
6258*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6259bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6260
6261*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6262(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6263
6264*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6265entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6266appropriate functions.
6267
6268*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6269entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6270
6271*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6272been cleaned.
6273
6274*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6275bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6276
6277*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6278shall be delimited.
6279
6280*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6281bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6282bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6283
6284*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6285field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6286prefixed with `ALT'.
6287
6288*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6289bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6290formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6291documentation).
6292
6293*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6294documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6295for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6296
6297*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6298comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6299
6300*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6301alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6302signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6303
6304*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6305
6306*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6307
6308*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6309from alien sources.
6310
6311*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6312to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6313crossref entries.
6314
6315*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6316region.
6317
6318*** Added support for imenu.
6319
6320*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6321of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6322`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6323`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6324
6325*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6326from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6327
6328** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6329
30a009a5 6330** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6331
a933dad1
DL
6332** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6333functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6334Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6335as an argument.
6336
6337When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6338and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6339
6340** browse-url changes
6341
6342*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6343Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6344(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6345non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6346customization variables.
6347
6348*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6349
6350*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6351lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6352(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6353
6354** Changes in Ediff
6355
6356*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6357pops up the Info file for this command.
6358
6359*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6360the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6361merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6362directories).
6363
6364*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6365and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6366files in the same directory.
6367
6368*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6369The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6370related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6371
6372** Changes in Viper
6373
6374*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6375*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6376 instead of vip-.
6377*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6378*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6379Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6380*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6381*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6382*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6383color when Viper is in insert state.
6384*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6385Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6386viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6387
6388** Etags changes.
6389
6390*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6391default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6392Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6393variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6394not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6395
6396*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6397
6398*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6399constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6400
6401*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6402recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6403In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6404
6405*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6406C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6407recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6408methods and protocols.
6409
6410*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6411.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6412column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6413paragraph name.
6414
6415*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6416an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6417at least M times and as many as N times.
6418
6419** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6420in files has changed slightly.
6421
6422With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6423time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6424This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6425with old time-stamp-format values.
6426
6427In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6428(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6429This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6430reasons.
6431
6432In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6433natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6434fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6435(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6436time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6437specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6438
6439Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6440case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6441truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6442
6443The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6444being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6445future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6446recommended now will continue to work then.
6447
6448See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6449details.
6450
6451** There are some additional major modes:
6452
6453dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6454m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6455meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6456
6457** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6458copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6459into Emacs.
6460
6461** New Lisp packages include:
6462
6463*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6464
6465*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6466be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6467
6468*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6469
6470*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6471in shell buffers.
6472
6473*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6474See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6475and `elint-defun'.
6476
6477*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6478meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6479ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6480strings or comments.
6481
6482These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6483abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6484you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6485insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6486at these points.
6487
6488*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6489can visit them by short forms of their names.
6490
6491*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6492Emacs Lisp function at point.
6493
6494*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6495
6496*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6497switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6498
6499*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6500
6501*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6502
6503*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6504
6505*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6506from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6507
6508*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6509You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6510inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6511original place after inserting the copy.
6512
6513*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6514on the buffer.
6515
6516You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6517velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6518(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6519
6520Enable mouse-drag with:
6521 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6522-or-
6523 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6524
6525*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6526mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6527
6528*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6529It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6530
6531*** ogonek
6532
6533The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6534Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6535platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6536TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6537ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6538prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6539instance) and vice versa.
6540
6541To use this package load it using
6542 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6543Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6544 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6545 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6546The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6547ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6548
6549*** Interface to ph.
6550
6551Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6552
6553The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6554services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6555these servers.
6556
6557*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6558
6559*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6560You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6561while the real cursor does not move.
6562
6563*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6564for visiting your favorite web sites.
6565
6566*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6567so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6568
6569** movemail change
6570
6571Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6572mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6573supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6574user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6575
6576This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6577\f
6578* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6579
6580** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6581
6582Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6583end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6584Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6585file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6586file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6587
6588To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6589C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6590coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6591specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6592LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6593save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6594\f
6595* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6596
6597** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6598Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6599vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6600Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6601
6602** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6603to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6604
6605In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6606don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6607"win".
6608
6609** Basic Lisp changes
6610
6611*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6612evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6613
6614*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6615be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6616or by the user.
6617
6618The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6619
6620*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6621
6622(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6623(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6624
6625*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6626usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6627its argument.
6628
6629*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6630
6631*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6632
6633*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6634
6635*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6636error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6637include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6638`format' function.
6639
6640*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6641or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6642whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6643
6644*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6645either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6646adding one of these suffixes.
6647
6648*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6649which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6650If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6651
6652We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6653because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6654
6655*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6656
6657*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6658You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6659
6660*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6661conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6662
6663 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6664
6665BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6666BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6667
6668*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6669choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6670restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6671works using `save-current-buffer'.
6672
6673*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6674write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6675of the last form.
6676
6677*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6678which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6679last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6680as the last form.
6681
6682*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6683characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6684matches.
6685
6686For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6687
6688*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6689with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6690Then it returns that string.
6691
6692For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6693
6694(with-output-to-string
6695 (princ "The buffer is ")
6696 (princ (buffer-name)))
6697
6698returns "The buffer is foo".
6699
6700** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6701is non-nil.
6702
6703These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6704buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6705characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6706
6707*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6708a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6709
6710Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6711character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6712Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6713position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6714characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6715 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6716
6717ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6718Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6719non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6720characters".
6721
6722The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6723through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6724"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6725range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6726leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6727
6728*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6729(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6730multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6731character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6732
6733This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6734always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6735
6736However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6737
a933dad1
DL
6738*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6739because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6740have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6741the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6742guaranteed.
6743
6744*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6745between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6746character).
6747
6748When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6749
6750 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6751 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6752 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6753 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6754 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6755
6756*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6757
6758*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6759`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6760more than the number of characters.
6761
6762You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6763it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6764\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6765is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6766follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6767newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6768
6769*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6770and returns a string containing those characters.
6771
6772*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6773(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6774counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6775character, sref signals an error.
6776
6777*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6778in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6779string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6780
6781*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6782in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6783region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6784
6785*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6786the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6787to a vector of the characters in it.
6788
6789*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6790of a string. You call it as follows:
6791
6792 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6793
6794This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6795STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6796This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6797Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6798it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6799
6800*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6801if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6802
6803*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6804if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6805
6806*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6807to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6808not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6809which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6810
6811(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6812
6813This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6814
6815The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6816If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6817are not included in the resulting value.
6818
6819The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6820at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6821WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6822is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6823
6824If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6825place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6826character extends across that column), then the padding character
6827PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6828string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6829column START-COLUMN.
6830
6831*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6832the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6833necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6834difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6835changed text, before the change.
6836
6837*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6838sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6839one character set for each script, not for each language.
6840
6841**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6842
6843**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6844
6845**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6846set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6847
6848**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6849name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6850which identify the character within that character set.
6851
6852**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6853byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6854opposite of split-char.
6855
6856**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6857of all the characters between BEG and END.
6858
6859**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6860of all the characters in a string.
6861
6862*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6863and specifying coding systems.
6864
6865**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6866system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6867of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6868(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6869and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6870as what to do about code conversion.)
6871
6872**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6873name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6874
6875**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6876for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6877except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6878
6879Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6880which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6881to match against a file name.
6882
6883VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6884a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6885decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6886to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6887systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6888specifies the coding system for encoding.
6889
6890If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6891or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6892
6893**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6894the coding system to use for network sockets.
6895
6896Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6897which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6898either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6899service names.
6900
6901VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6902a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6903decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6904to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6905systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6906specifies the coding system for encoding.
6907
6908If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6909or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6910
6911**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6912for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6913except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6914start the subprocess.
6915
6916**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6917systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6918when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6919(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6920to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6921
6922**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6923coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6924subprocess.
6925
6926It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6927but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6928start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6929connection permanently or until overridden.
6930
6931The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6932file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6933network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6934coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6935It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6936system for one operation at a time.
6937
6938**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6939files, subprocesses or network connections.
6940
6941**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6942coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6943The value is a cons cell,
6944 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6945where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6946the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6947input to the subprocess.
6948
6949**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6950change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6951
6952** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6953customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6954you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6955
6956You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6957variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6958information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6959legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6960customization.
6961
6962Thus, instead of writing
6963
6964 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6965 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6966
6967you would now write this:
6968
6969 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6970 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6971 :type 'boolean
6972 :group foo)
6973
6974The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6975two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6976describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6977for a description of them.
6978
6979The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6980should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6981
6982 (defgroup ispell nil
6983 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6984 :group 'processes)
6985
6986The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6987group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6988but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6989to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6990second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6991
6992Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6993package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6994have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6995package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6996first-level subgroups.
6997
6998** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6999
7000This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7001separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7002
7003** easy-mmode
7004
7005The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7006developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7007only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7008predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7009`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7010`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7011
7012** Text property changes
7013
7014*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7015text property.
7016
7017*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7018previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7019place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7020functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7021starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7022
7023If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7024LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7025of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7026position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7027
7028*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7029value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7030is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7031
7032** Changes in invisibility features
7033
7034*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7035hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7036is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7037should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7038would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7039make the overlay visible.
7040
7041During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7042invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7043needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7044which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7045the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7046t when it should hide it.
7047
7048*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7049
7050Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7051invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7052and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7053Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7054manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7055Here is an example of how to do this:
7056
7057 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7058 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7059 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7060 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7061
7062 ...
7063 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7064
7065 ...
7066 ;; When done with the overlays:
7067 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7068 ;; Or respectively:
7069 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7070
7071** Changes in syntax parsing.
7072
7073*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7074`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7075obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7076`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7077
7078If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7079is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7080used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7081
7082When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7083character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7084
7085 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7086 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7087
7088 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7089 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7090 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7091
7092 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7093 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7094 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7095 determine the syntax type of the character.
7096
7097 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7098 of the current buffer.
7099
7100*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7101value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7102for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7103
7104*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7105and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7106only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7107character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7108another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7109
7110These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7111text property.
7112
7113*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7114arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7115of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7116
7117*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7118(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7119element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7120nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7121string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7122
7123*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7124syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7125`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7126
7127** Changes in face features
7128
7129*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7130if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7131
7132*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7133of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7134
7135*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7136set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7137
7138*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7139set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7140
7141*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7142by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7143and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7144the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7145overlay property).
7146
7147This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7148arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7149
7150** Changes in file-handling functions
7151
7152*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7153directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7154they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7155is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7156
7157This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7158begins with ~.
7159
7160*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7161it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7162
7163*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7164the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7165
7166*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7167as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7168
7169*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7170character code conversion as well as other things.
7171
7172Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7173(formerly it did not).
7174
7175*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7176environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7177
7178*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7179instead of constant strings.
7180
7181*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7182to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7183any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7184
7185substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7186in the same way as before.
7187
7188*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7189The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7190which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7191
7192*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7193error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7194else, and returns nil.
7195
7196*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7197directory cannot be listed.
7198
7199** Changes in minibuffer input
7200
7201*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7202read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7203additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7204argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7205ways:
7206
7207 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7208 It is available through the history command M-n.
7209
7210*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7211read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7212argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7213minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7214enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7215
7216In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7217argument in this way.
7218
7219*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7220from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7221minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7222
7223** Echo area features
7224
7225*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7226echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7227minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7228after the echo area is cleared.
7229
7230*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7231in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7232
7233** Keyboard input features
7234
7235*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7236set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7237
7238*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7239received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7240by keyboard macros.
7241
7242** Frame-related changes
7243
7244*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7245creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7246hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7247
7248*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7249the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7250has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7251
7252*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7253selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7254value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7255in the selected frame.
7256
7257*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7258is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7259which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7260
7261** X Windows features
7262
7263*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7264x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7265x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7266
7267*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7268The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7269
7270*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7271MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7272A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7273
7274If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7275it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7276
7277** Subprocess features
7278
7279*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7280functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7281automatically.
7282
7283*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7284and returns the output from the command as a string.
7285
7286*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7287and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7288
7289** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7290does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7291
7292** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7293at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7294goes after the other menu items.
7295
7296** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7297of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7298around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7299are in use.
7300
7301The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7302series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7303
7304Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7305after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7306form.
7307
7308** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7309is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7310but its hook is still run.
7311
7312** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7313for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7314
7315If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7316regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7317useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7318
7319This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7320are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7321filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7322warned.
7323
7324** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7325way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7326
7327** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7328integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7329functions like display-time.
7330
7331** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7332name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7333
7334** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7335can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7336is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7337
7338** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7339if there is an error in compilation.
7340
7341** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7342switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7343argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7344they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7345
7346** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7347Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7348the *scratch* buffer.
7349
7350** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7351The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7352where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7353e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7354
7355** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7356and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7357It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7358
7359** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7360using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7361variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7362and compose-mail-other-frame.
7363
7364** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7365can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7366full name of the specified user will be returned.
7367
7368** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7369of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7370where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7371in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7372option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7373files at all.
7374
7375** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7376and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7377width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7378the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7379
7380For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7381minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7382with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7383is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7384
7385** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7386
7387** imenu.el changes.
7388
7389You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7390item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7391
7392An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7393#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7394select one of those items.
7395\f
7396* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7397\f
7398* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7399
7400** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7401mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7402
7403** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7404use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7405Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7406\f
7407* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7408
7409** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7410To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7411
7412** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7413conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7414matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7415expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7416word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7417all caps.
7418
7419** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7420at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7421
7422When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7423does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7424as in previous Emacs versions.
7425
7426** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7427non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7428time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7429frames.
7430
7431** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7432if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7433This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7434Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7435accident.
7436
7437** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7438keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7439It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7440line and then executing the macro.
7441
7442This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7443
7444** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7445(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7446characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7447characters.
7448
7449** Font Lock mode
7450
7451*** Font Lock support modes
7452
7453Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7454below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7455hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7456to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7457Font Lock mode is enabled.
7458
7459For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7460
7461 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7462
7463in your ~/.emacs.
7464
7465*** lazy-lock
7466
7467The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7468only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7469becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7470Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7471occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7472buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7473Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7474
7475To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7476
7477 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7478
7479To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7480
7481** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7482
7483*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7484paren and key.
7485
7486*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7487supported.
7488
7489** Gnus changes.
7490
7491Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7492commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7493significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7494previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7495
7496Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7497between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7498
79214ddf 7499*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7500variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7501obsolete.
7502
7503*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7504missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7505
7506 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7507
7508*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7509
7510 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7511
7512*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7513referred.
a933dad1
DL
7514
7515*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7516
7517 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7518
7519*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7520
7521 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7522
7523*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7524buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7525
7526 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7527
7528*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7529
7530 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7531
7532*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7533
7534 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7535
7536*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7537
7538 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7539
7540*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7541is possible.
7542
7543 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7544
7545*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7546groups of groups.
7547
7548*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7549
7550*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7551batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7552
7553*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7554
7555*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7556
7557*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7558
7559 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7560
7561*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7562expiration times.
7563
7564*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7565
7566*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7567process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7568
7569*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7570articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7571bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7572
7573*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7574articles with the `*' command.
7575
7576*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7577
7578*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7579
7580 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7581
7582*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7583
79214ddf 7584*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7585`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7586
7587*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7588buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7589
7590*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7591
7592*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7593
7594*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7595
7596 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7597
79214ddf 7598*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7599
7600 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7601
79214ddf 7602*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7603
7604*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7605
79214ddf 7606*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7607
79214ddf 7608 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7609 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7610
7611*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7612refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7613
7614 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7615
7616*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7617buffer to allow easier treatment.
7618
7619*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7620
7621*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7622
7623 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7624
7625*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7626articles.
a933dad1
DL
7627
7628 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7629
79214ddf 7630*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7631
7632*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7633cited text to hide is now customizable.
7634
7635 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7636
7637*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7638
7639 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7640
7641*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7642
7643*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7644
7645The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7646in greater detail.
7647\f
7648* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7649
7650** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7651second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7652asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7653exists.
7654
7655** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7656as well as lists.
7657
7658** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7659of a given keymap.
7660
7661** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7662given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7663keymap or nil.
7664
7665** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7666an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7667name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7668menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7669equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7670alias.
7671\f
7672* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7673
7674** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7675
7676Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7677This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7678was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7679far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7680pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7681
7682For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7683you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7684`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7685
7686** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7687
7688The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7689do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7690It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7691much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7692chapter of the manual for details.
7693
7694However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7695customization variables take effect.
7696
7697** Marking with the mouse.
7698
7699When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7700highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7701using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7702
7703** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7704
7705*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7706
7707*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7708to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7709
7710*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7711in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7712you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7713application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7714applications, these problems are significant.
7715
7716If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7717likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7718However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7719will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7720other DOS application as a subprocess.
7721
7722Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7723You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7724
7725If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7726subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7727have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7728Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7729separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7730Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7731
7732** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7733
7734This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7735which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7736minibuffer contains.
7737
7738** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7739
7740The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7741It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7742It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7743affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7744
7745The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7746it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7747and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7748when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7749
7750** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7751enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7752
7753** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7754F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7755Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7756
7757If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7758menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7759something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7760the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7761
7762 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7763
7764** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7765to replace the characters it "deletes".
7766
7767** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7768
7769** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7770a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7771select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7772It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7773immediately after the selected one.
7774
7775This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7776made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7777
7778** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7779
7780Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7781directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7782If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7783Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7784recover-session.
7785
7786You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7787auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7788will not work.
7789
7790Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7791normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7792this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7793bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7794now that the bug is fixed.
7795
7796** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7797
7798There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7799when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7800Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7801which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7802
7803If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7804telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7805VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7806the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7807
7808** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7809Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7810is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7811
7812There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7813Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7814enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7815The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7816remain normal.
7817
7818** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7819header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7820
7821Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7822known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7823offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7824Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7825
7826Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7827of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7828a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7829name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7830documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7831`mail-directory-stream'.)
7832
7833** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7834skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7835characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7836with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7837
7838Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7839- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7840wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7841
7842The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7843less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7844headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7845Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7846Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7847fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7848to a limitation in font-lock).
7849
7850External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7851
7852** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7853buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7854buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7855this example:
7856
7857 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7858 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7859
7860** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7861
7862*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7863
7864*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7865
7866*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7867
7868*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7869entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7870will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7871isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7872(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7873The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7874
7875*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7876does the same job.
7877
7878*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7879"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7880
7881*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7882text.
7883
7884** Font Lock mode
7885
7886*** Global Font Lock mode
7887
7888Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7889new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7890font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7891turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7892on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7893
7894For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7895
7896 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7897
7898in your ~/.emacs.
7899
7900*** Local Refontification
7901
7902In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7903However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7904those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7905command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7906
7907In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7908(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7909current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7910above and below point.
7911
7912With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7913
7914** Follow mode
7915
7916Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7917buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7918side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7919they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7920split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7921follow-mode.
7922
7923M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7924
7925To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7926command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7927
7928** hide-show changes.
7929
7930The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7931to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7932normal hooks.
7933
7934** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7935The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7936
7937** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7938recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7939those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7940
7941** MSDOS Changes
7942
7943*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7944Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7945
7946*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7947and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7948
7949*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7950
7951*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7952pressing both mouse buttons.
7953
7954*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7955restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7956are:
a933dad1
DL
7957
7958**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7959now works.
7960
7961**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7962
7963**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7964implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7965
7966**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7967
7968**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7969
7970**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7971
7972**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7973
7974**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7975\f
7976* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7977
7978** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7979tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7980remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7981this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7982behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7983
7984** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7985
7986The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7987not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7988need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7989be different.
7990
7991It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7992than `system-type'.
7993
7994See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7995
7996** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7997now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7998
7999** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8000that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8001
8002** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8003no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8004reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8005
8006The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8007to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8008like this:
8009
8010 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8011
8012SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8013It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8014becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8015
8016REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8017seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8018means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8019
8020*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8021up if too much time passes.
8022
8023 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8024
8025This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8026If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8027of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8028form in BODY.
8029
8030*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8031a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8032call looks like this:
8033
8034 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8035
8036SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8037runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8038timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8039ARGS.
8040
8041Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8042command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8043command.
8044
8045REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8046time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8047does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8048each time Emacs becomes idle.
8049
8050If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8051idle for SECS seconds.
8052
8053*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8054all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8055programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8056instead.
8057
8058*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8059there is no answer within a certain time.
8060
8061 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8062
8063asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8064within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8065Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8066
8067** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8068arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8069meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8070arguments in between are ignored.
8071
8072This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8073the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8074
8075** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8076/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8077/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8078site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8079version.
8080
8081It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8082version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8083for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8084has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8085and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8086problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8087
8088** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8089.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8090systems with limited file name syntax.
8091
8092Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8093convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8094for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8095completions.el:
8096
8097(defvar save-completions-file-name
8098 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8099 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8100
8101This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8102depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8103convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8104Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8105MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8106
8107** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8108rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8109minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8110
8111** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8112marker from its buffer position.
8113
8114** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8115Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8116The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8117
8118** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8119that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8120condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8121of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8122matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8123regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8124
8125This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8126errors that happen often during editing.
8127
8128** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8129into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8130puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8131
8132** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8133now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8134
8135** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8136a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8137name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8138to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8139and not get-buffer-window.
8140
8141** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8142calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8143being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8144
8145If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8146buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8147property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8148non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8149are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8150property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8151over and over for the same text.
8152
8153** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8154
8155*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8156in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8157
8158;; @(#) HEADER: text
8159;; $HEADER: text $
8160
8161in addition to the normal
8162
8163;; HEADER: text
8164
8165*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8166checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8167lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8168\f
8169* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8170
8171----------------------------------------------------------------------
8172Copyright information:
8173
404fa7d6 8174Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8175
8176 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8177 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8178 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8179 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8180
8181 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8182 of this document, or of portions of it,
8183 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8184 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8185\f
8186Local variables:
8187mode: outline
8188paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8189end: